Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKG800

KG800

P/N : MMBB0207017

(

1.0

)

KG800 KG800

Some of contents in this manual may differ

from your phone depending on the software

of the phone or your service provider.

KG800_Arabic Cover_1.0_0515.indd 1KG800_Arabic Cover_1.0_0515.indd 1 2006.5.16 10:21:53 PM2006.5.16 10:21:53 PM

Summary of content (284 pages)

PAGE 1
KG800 KG800_Arabic Cover_1.0_0515.indd 1 P/N : MMBB0207017(1.0) W KG800 KG800 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider. 2006.5.
PAGE 2
‫‪ KG800‬دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﻧﺺ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدر
PAGE 4
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫اﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮة اﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠّ ﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮم ﺻﻮرى‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳ
PAGE 5
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻫﺎب اﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫أﺻﻮات‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
PAGE 6
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮاءة »اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ« ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ اﻷﻳﺪي وﺟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ أزل ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ أو‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻏﻼق اﻟﻐﻄﺎء وﻛﺎﻧﺖ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪).‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ »ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮل«(‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬ ‫ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬‫‪ MP3‬أو ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬أو اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫أو‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻌﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﳌﺪة ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪5‬ﺛﻮان(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳉﻮال ‪ KG800‬اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷداء اﳌﺘﻘﺪم وﺻﻐﺮ اﳊﺠﻢ واﳌﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪث ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي دﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫دﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﳊﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻷداء وﲡﻨﺐ إﳊﺎق اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﺳﻮء‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬إﺟﺮاء أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات أو‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت ﻏﻴﺮ اﳌﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮاﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻀﻤﺎن‬ ‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﲔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ اﻷﺣﻮال‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱳ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﲢﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪك أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎدة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﺰود‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد أو اﳌﺼﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎوﻳﺔ أو ﻓﻲ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﲡﺮي ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت واﻟﺸﻮاﺣﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﶈﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﲤﺴﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﲔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو إﺣﺪاث ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪا ﻋﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫)اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( وﻣﻌﺪل اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳉﻮال ‪KG800‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮوط ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ واﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺮوط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺷﺨﺎص ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ أﻋﻤﺎرﻫﻢ‬ ‫أوﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪ x‬ﲡﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮط اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰازات اﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﳋﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫إذا ﰎ ﻛﺴﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺎ أو ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺼﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﻠﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎش ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﳌﻮاد اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أو اﻟﺘﻨﺮ)ﻣﺨﻔﻒ اﻟﻄﻼء( أو اﻟﻜﺤﻮل(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻸدﺧﻨﺔ أو اﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮط‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ أو اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬ ‫واﳌﺬﻳﺎع واﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎرج ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫وﻫﻨﺎك‪ ،‬رﺟﺎء ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺄ ّن ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮل ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪرك ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪور ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﺎول ﻋﺒﻮر اﻟﺸﺎرع‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﲔ واﻟﻠﻮاﺋﺢ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﳉﻮاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮد ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪوﻳًﺎً أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎدة‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻋﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﺰود‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﻮد أو‬ ‫اﳌﻮاد اﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ أو ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻐﺎزات أو اﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎل أو اﳌﻮاد اﳌﺘﻔﺠﺮة ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﳉﻮال واﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول‬ ‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﺰاء ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱳ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪوث ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻮش( ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻗﺼﺮ داﺋﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻼت اﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷداء اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎت اﳌﺮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﲔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﺰم اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬أﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮة زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫أﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة وﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔووﻇﺎﺋﻒﻋﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫أﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ :‬إدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻬﺎ واﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﲟﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬‫ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫إﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬إدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫واﻷﺣﺮف‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪:‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ j‬ﻟﻔ
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ااﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺆدي ﻫﺬه اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻹﺟﺮاءات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض آﺧﺮ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة‬ ‫واﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ واﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر )ﻣﻔﺘﻮح(‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر )ﻣﻐﻠﻖ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻀﻮء اﳋﻠﻔﻲ‪) .‬اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار(‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪ -‬اﺿﺎءة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﺎرﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬اﻇﻬﺎر ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫وأﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ x‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار(‬ ‫‪ x‬إﻧﻬﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت أو رﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼش‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎت‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪/‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ وﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وأﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫واﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷول‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﺮ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ واﻹرﺷﺎدات وأﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪ .‬وﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮدة اﶈﺎدﺛﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة‬ ‫أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫وﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ وﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮت ردﻳﺌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫اﻋﺘﺒﺎر أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮًا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮدة‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد أﺷﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬وﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )اﻻﺗﺼﺎل واﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰاز‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎم‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬داﺧﻞ اﳊﺎﻣﻞ اﺨﻤﻟﺼﺺ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫وأن اﲡﺎه ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ، SIM‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ واﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﲡﺎه اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﲢﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫وﺣﺮك اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG800‬‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .2‬إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮك اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻷﻣﺎم ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ أوﻻ ً ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻊ اﳊﻔﺎظ ﻋﻠﻲ اﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ادﻓﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﳋﺎص ﲟﻬﺎﻳﻰء‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ داﺧﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﳉﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﺗﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺻﻞ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﲟﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 24
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ و‪/‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮدﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎرج ﺑﻠﺪك‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺤﻮل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻧﺰع ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 25
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺮاد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪/‬اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ a‬ﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻛﻮد‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺴﺢ ‪b‬‬ ‫ﶈﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل ‪ a‬ﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫أو ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﳝﻦ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻷذن أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ‪. o‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺰء اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت وﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 27
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ k‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺮف ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮف واﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫اﻛﺘﺐ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ ﻳﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪.‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻼت اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ T9‬واﳌﻌﺮوف ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻗﻞ ﻋﺪد‬ ‫ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ أﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﳉﺪﻳﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮس‪ .
PAGE 29
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إ ذا ﻇﻠﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ إﲤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة أو ﻣﺮﺗﺎن‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ واﺛﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إ ذا ﻓﻘﺪت اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﳊﺮوف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ أ ب ت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء إﻟﻰ اﳉﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﳌﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﳊﺮوف اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻷول‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎن ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬وﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺤﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﳊﺬف أي ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳊﺮوف‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪ . b‬اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ b‬ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻷﺣﺮف اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﺮة وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫أﺣﺮف‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 31
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺣﺮف إﻟﻰ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ﻳﺘﻴﺢ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز إدﺧﺎل ﻋﺪة‬ ‫رﻣﻮز أو ﺣﺮوف ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻹدﺧﺎل أﺣﺪ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ )ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ واﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻤﻴﺰة ‪d‬‬ ‫و ‪ . e‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮض وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ أدوار ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺴﻴﺎق اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًة ﻓﻮق ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إﻟﻰ اﻟﺪور اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل‬ ‫إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎﻻت ﺟﻬﺎت‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫أوﻻ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ MP3‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ ،‬واﳋﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮوﺣﺔ أدﻧﺎه‪.
PAGE 34
‫رﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ رﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ واردة دون اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼل اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ رﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ واردة ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ وﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪/‬رﻓﺾ أو ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫إﻻ أﻧﻚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎدرا ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻫﺬه اﳋﻴﺎرات ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪد ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﲔ ﻓﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻫﻮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﲔ‪ .‬ﲟﺠﺮد أن ﺗﺒﺪأ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ أﻧﺖ اﳌﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ وﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫أﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻷﻃﺮاف‪.‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ إﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاﺋﻚ ﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫اﻵن‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪ . a‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .
PAGE 36
‫ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﲔ اﳌﺸﺎرﻛﲔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﳌﺆﲤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎر ﻣﺆﲤﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎص وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﲔ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫إﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﳌﺘﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ إﺣﺪى ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﳌﺆﲤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ واﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺪرج ﲢﺘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻷرﻗﺎم اﺨﻤﻟﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪ x1.x. 1‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ادوات‬ ‫‪ .5‬اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫‪ x2.x. 1‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎص‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫‪ x3.x. 1‬إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪات‬ ‫‪ 4.5‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ 6.3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 6.
PAGE 38
‫‪ 1.6‬اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 2.8‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 2.9‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.9‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪MP3 4.6‬‬ ‫‪ 4.8‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4.9‬اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.6‬اﻟﺒﻮم ﺻﻮرى‬ ‫‪ 5.8‬ﻧﺺ‬ ‫‪ 5.9‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 6.8‬اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫‪ 6.9‬اﻋﺪادات اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7.6‬اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 7.8‬أﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪ 7.9‬اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8.8‬ﻏﻴﺮ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫‪ 8.9‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ .7‬اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .6‬اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ .8‬اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 39
‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎت اﳉﻮال‬ ‫وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻷﺣﺪاث واﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎت‬ ‫وﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﳌﺘﺼﻠﲔ‪ .‬ﺧﻤﺴﺔ أوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪة ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ وﻫﻲ‪” :‬اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻓﻘﻂ“‪ ،‬و ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“‪،‬‬ ‫و ”ﻋﺎم“‪ ،‬و ”ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎل“ و ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس“‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ وﺿﻊ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ وﺣﺪد ”اﻷوﺿﺎع“ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(x1.x. 1‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ أي‬ ‫اﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪه ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(x3.x. 1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع ”اﻫﺘﺰاز‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ“ و ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ و ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع وﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ d‬أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد‬ ‫”إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻛﺘﺐ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ واﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﳋﻂ اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ) ‪( CLI‬‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ واﻻﺳﻢ )إن وﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮض أوﻗﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻼت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ”اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ“ و”اﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ“‪ .‬وﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة وﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت دﻓﻌﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.2‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.6.2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺪة آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 3.6.2‬‬ ‫) ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪( SIM‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫وﺳﻌﺮ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻌﺎر وﺣﺪات اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪. PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﳋﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪات ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪ .‬إذا‬ ‫ﺣﺪدت ﻗﺮاءة‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا‬ ‫ﺣﺪدت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ادوات‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬وﲟﺠﺮد إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫إن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ SMS‬و‪ MMS‬واﻷﻟﻌﺎب‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت واﻻﺗﺼﺎل وﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﳌﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫و‪ MP3‬واﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ‪ 5‬أوﻗﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وأدﺧﻞ وﻗﺖ إﻃﻼق اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ادوات‬ ‫ادوات‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳊﺴﺎب‬ ‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪ h‬ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﰋ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل ) (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﳝﻦ ‪] e‬رﺟﻮع[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ أي ﻗﻴﺎس إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎك‬ ‫‪ 4‬أﻧﻮاع ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ وﺣﺪات‪” :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ“ و‬ ‫”اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ“ و ”اﻟﻄﻮل“ و ”اﻟﻮزن“ و ”درﺟﺔ اﳊﺮارة“ و‬ ‫”اﳊﺠﻢ“ و ”اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ“‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.1.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ”ﺑﺤﺚ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﳝﻦ‬ ‫]ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ[ أو ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬أدﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻔﻮري ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل اﳊﺮف اﻷول ﻟﻼﺳﻢ أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻷوﻟﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﻮد اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ أﺣﺪ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ أو إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻷﺣﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪد ‪] d‬ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺻﻮر اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻻ ﺑﺪ أن ﺗﻜﻮن دﻗﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪72‬‬ ‫× ‪.72‬‬ ‫اﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.1.4‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ إدﺧﺎل دﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 1000‬إدﺧﺎل‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 40‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫وﺣﻔﻆ اﳊﺮوف ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ . SIM‬ﻋﺪد اﳊﺮوف ﻣﻴﺰة‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪. SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮا ً ﻓﻲ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻋﻀﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮض أﻋﻀﺎء اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫رﻧﲔ ﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت أﻋﻀﺎء اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫أﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪد أﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﻋﻀﻮا ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء‬ ‫اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬إﻻ أن اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼن ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.1.4‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪( SIM‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ رﻗﻤﻚ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ وﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪. SIM‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 6.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻷﻋﻤﺎل اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ اﻻﺳﻢ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎل ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪] d‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ[ وأدﺧﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﳊﻘﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 7.1.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪] e‬اﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 50
‫اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫• إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ : SIM‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ‪ : SIM‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪. SIM‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﳌﻴﺰة ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪد اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت اﳋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫واﻟﺬي ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﳝﻦ ‪e‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﺣﺪد ”ﺣﺬف‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻞ“‪ ،‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪l k‬‬ ‫‪ji‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﳊﺬف اﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﶈﺪدة أو ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﳌﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪] d‬ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.2.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪول ﺟﺪﻳﺪ وﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﻟﻴﻮم‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ اﳌﻮﺿﻮع واﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪ .
PAGE 52
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﳌﺬﻛﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]إﺿﺎﻓﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬أدﺧﻞ اﳌﺬﻛﺮة ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪] d‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫إذا أردت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.4‬‬ ‫‪1‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ اﻟﺬي ﺳﺘﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ اﳌﻴﻼدي او اﻟﻬﺠﺮي او اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 53
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪SMS‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة ( و ‪ ) MMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة ( و اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ وﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ واﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﳉﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا أردت ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 54
‫‪ x‬إرﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﻹرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ رﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ j‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﻠﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ دﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ آﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ اﻹرﺳﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺴﻮدات‪ :‬ﳊﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﻮدات‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﳋﻂ واﶈﺎذاة‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ وﳕﻂ‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮط وﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﻠﻮن‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮن اﻟﻮاﺟﻬﺔ واﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.1.5‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة وﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﳉﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا أردت ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد ” ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة أو اﺧﺘﻴﺎر واﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﳕﺎذج رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 56
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرة ) ‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬وﻋﻼوة ﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أﺛﻨﺎء وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ إزاﻟﺔ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺼﻮر أو‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻮات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﳋﻴﺎر إﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 57
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﻘﺮوءة‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺮوءة‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ دﻓﻊ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﰎ اﻹﺧﻄﺎر ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫إذا ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ” ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،“ SIM‬ﻳﺠﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‪ .‬وإذا ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ” ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮدع‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ و اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ و اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫* رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮدة‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻛﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻮدة ﲢﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﳊﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺷﻚ أن‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ و ﺷﻜﻞ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ أو ﻓﺸﻞ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 59
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﲟﺠﺮد ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪] d‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح رﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫و ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮت ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﻣﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.
PAGE 60
‫)ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﺎر‬ ‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ أﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ وﺣﺬف ﻓﺌﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ أﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ أرﻗﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ أرﻗﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎذج‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.5‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.7.
PAGE 61
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.5‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.8.5‬‬ ‫‪ x‬أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ وﺻﻮت وﻓﺎﻛﺲ واﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ‪X 400‬‬ ‫وﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ و ‪ERMES‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻧﻮع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت أﺧﺮى‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪى ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻼم اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﳌﻴﺰة‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ورود ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺒﻼد‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻮال ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 63
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.8.5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳋﻴﺎرات ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أو ﻋﺪم‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 64
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.6‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ُﳝ ّﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪ ،‬واﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻮرة ﳉﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ ،‬واﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وأﻏﺮاض‬ ‫أﺧﺮى ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬وﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة أو ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ا ﳊﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ّ x‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.
PAGE 65
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺪد ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ اﻻﺳﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ ‪ l، k‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮر )ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ أن اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 72× 72‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮدﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.6‬‬ ‫ُﳝ ّﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ وﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.3.6‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ وﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.6‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ KG800‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬وﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫وﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﳊﺎﻻت ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﳊﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫وﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد أﺻﻮات ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ : M4A ، MP4 x‬ﺗﺮدد ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬وﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : WMA x‬ﺗﺮدد ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ إﻟﻰ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬وﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ا ﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ KG800‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﳌﻌﺪل اﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬و ‪ . AAC‬وﻟﻬﺬا‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪VBR MP3‬‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 68
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﻤﺎع اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻜﺮار ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺟﺰء اﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ اﳋﺎص‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ« ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ ﻓﻲ ”اﻻوﺿﺎع“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ اﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر‬‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪك ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺌﺎت‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎدل‪.
PAGE 69
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮم ﺻﻮرى‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.6‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر وإرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﻋﻼوة ﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻹﻃﺎر ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮر‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ارﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬ﺑﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ارﺳﺎل اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة وﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ واﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺻﻮرة ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.
PAGE 70
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.7.6‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ آﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ ”‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ “ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺼﻮر آﻟ ًﻴﺎ دون ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.6‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.7.6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.
PAGE 71
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬اﺨﻤﻟﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼت‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ واﻷﺧﺒﺎر وﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ اﻟﻄﻘﺲ وﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺣﻼت اﳉﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﰎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬه اﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰودي‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪. WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬واﻷﺳﻌﺎر واﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ و‪/‬أو ﻣﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ أﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﻣﺰودي اﳋﺪﻣﺔ إرﺷﺎدات ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳋﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪه ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.. 7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ اﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد ”إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ URL‬اﳌﺮاد وﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻪ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“‪.
PAGE 73
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.. 7‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ واﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﳌﺆﻗﺘﺔ وﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط واﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻوﺿﺎع‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.4. 7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﻮ ذﻟﻚ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﶈﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إﻋﺪادات‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ إﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ WAP‬وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﶈﺪد‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ إﻋﺪادات ‪ : GPRS‬ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ إﻋﺪادات ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫اﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ GPRS‬ﻛﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : APN‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ APN‬اﳋﺎص ب ‪. GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮف اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﳋﺎدم‬ ‫‪ APN‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ :‬ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺎدم ‪ APN‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺒﺮوﻛﺴﻲ‬‫اﻟﺒﺮوﻛﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أو إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺒﺮوﻛﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ : IP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ IP‬اﳋﺎص‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮوﻛﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ رﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﺒﺮوﻛﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 75
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.4. 7‬‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﺼﻮص اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 6.4. 7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲟﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺷﻬﺎدات اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎدات اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻟﺸﻬﺎدات اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎدات اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.8‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.1.8‬‬ ‫• اﻷﻟﻌﺎب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳉﻮال‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت أو ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ أو‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ أو ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮى ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ اﶈﺪد أو ﺑﺪء اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﶈﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳋﻴﺎرات‪.
PAGE 77
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ JAR‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ وﻳﻌﺪ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪JAD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ وﺻﻔ ًﻴﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻗﺒﻞ أن ﺗﻘﻮم‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫أوﺻﺎف اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JAD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ أن ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ) ‪ ( J2ME‬اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﻧﻮاع‬ ‫اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬اﳉﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮاﺋﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻢ اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ KG800‬وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎم ﻛﺒﻴﺮة‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬واﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺟﺮب ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫وﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن اﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ اﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ أﻳﺔ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 79
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻛﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﻓﺾ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ .‬ﲟﺠﺮد ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮض ‪ KG800‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل أﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪My Media‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ وﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪات اﳋﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ وأﺧﺮى واﻟﺼﻮر ‪Music,‬‬ ‫‪Others, Photos, Text and‬‬ ‫‪ .Videos‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬه اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪات‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻋﺪم رؤﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪات‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪Text‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .txt‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ txt‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Videos‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫وﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.3GP‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺄي ﺣﺠﻢ إﻟﻰ أن‬ ‫ﲤﺘﻠﺊ ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪Photos‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﻬﺬا اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.JPG‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPG‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“ أو ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻋﺮض“‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ .‬اﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ‪ 200‬ﺣﺮف وﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻣﺘﺪاد‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﳊﺬف اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﳊﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ JPG‬اﻟﺬي ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 460‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.TXT‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ TXT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“ أو ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻋﺮض“ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ TXT‬اﻟﺬي ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 460‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل اﳌﻠﻒ اﶈﺪد إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫آﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫اﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ .‬اﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ‪ 100‬ﺣﺮف وﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻣﺘﺪاد‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 83
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫أﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.8‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪] d‬ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳋﻴﺎرات ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت اﶈﺪد‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SMS‬أو‬ ‫‪ MMS‬أو ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.8‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.1. 9‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ي ي‪/‬ش ش ‪/‬س س س س‬ ‫ش ش ‪/‬ي ي ‪/‬س س س س‬ ‫س س س س ‪/‬ش ش‪/‬ي ي‬ ‫ي ي‪:‬ﻳﻮم ‪ ،‬ش ش‪:‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪ ،‬س س ‪ :‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.1. 9‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ إﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪24‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ أو ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.2.
PAGE 85
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 3.2. 9‬‬ ‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 4.2. 9‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة إﺿﺎءة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.2. 9‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 40%‬إﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.100%‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 6.2. 9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 7.2.
PAGE 86
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻮص اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5 . 9‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.5.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل أﺟﻬﺰة اﳉﻮال‬ ‫اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ووﺣﺪاﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ًﻴﺎ‪ ،‬اﻷﻣﺮ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ اﻟﺮأس اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث أو‬ ‫رﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 87
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث أو إﻟﻐﺎؤﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪/‬أﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑـ ‪KG800‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إدﺧﺎل أﺟﻬﺰة ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ أو أﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮى اﳋﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺗﺼﺎل‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬أﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺟﺪﻳﺪة واﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﻢ إﻟﻰ اﻻﺟﻬﺰة ﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮدم‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.5.9‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺘﺮن‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ x‬رؤﻳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ .‬اﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪. KG800‬‬ ‫اﳋﺪﻣﺎت اﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 89
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫آﻟﻲ‬ ‫إذا ﺣﺪدت اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮف ﻳﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻳﺤﺪدﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﲟﺠﺮد أن‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪوي‬ ‫ﺳﻮف ﻳﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ وﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ اﺗﻔﺎق ﲡﻮال ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ أﺧﺮى إذا ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﶈﺪدة‪.
PAGE 90
‫اﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6 . 9‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.6. 9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻮاردة إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﲟﺰود اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻛﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺷﺮوط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎل‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم اﻟﺮد‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 91
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫أرﻗﺎم ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ آﺧﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.6. 9‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎزك ﻟﻠﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إﻏﻼق اﻟﺮد‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺮد اﻷﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺎم‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺟﺘﻤﺎع‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ اﺟﺘﻤﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﻴﺎدة‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎدة‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻼم اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ]إﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪] a‬إرﺳﺎل[ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ أن ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺨﺺ اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﺗﺮك اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 93
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.6. 9‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮل ) ﺗﻠﻘﻲ (‬ ‫اﻋﺪادات اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ إﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ(‬ ‫اﻋﺪادات اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻋﺪادات اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 6.6.
PAGE 94
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.7. 9‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام رﻣﺰ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻹﻋﺪاد ”ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ ، “ SIM‬ﻓﺴﻮف‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻣﺰ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪. SIM‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 3.7. 9‬‬ ‫ﲤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاء أو ﺗﻠﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ .
PAGE 95
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮرة‬ ‫أم ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 4.7. 9‬‬ ‫) اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا ً إﻟﻰ ‪( SIM‬‬ ‫ﳊﺼﺮ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﻣﺰ ‪. PIN2‬‬ ‫إن اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺴﻤﺎح ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﲤﻜﲔ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﲤﻜﲔ رﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﶈﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﳊﺼﺮ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬إﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﶈﺪد‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة واﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ وذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8 . 9‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9 . 9‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة إﻋﺪادات اﳌﺼﻨﻊ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة وإﻧﺸﺎء دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‪.
PAGE 97
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﻼل‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﺟﺪك ﺧﺎرج اﳌﻨﺰل أو‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻼﻳﺪوﻳﺔ ﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫وﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫اﻷذن‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ :‬زر ‪ ) Answer‬رد ( وزر ‪ ) End‬إﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﲟﺸﻐﻞ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫( ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬وزر ‪ ) Hold‬اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ( ‪ ،‬وﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪KG800 :‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎ م ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ‪+55°C :‬‬ ‫أدﻧﻰ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬
PAGE 99
‫‪ KG800‬دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎرﺳ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
PAGE 100
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ ‪8‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪13 KG 800‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺟﺰاء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺎر‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎرژر‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ دادن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫اﺳﺎﻣ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‪30‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت
PAGE 101
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮوه ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت و ﺰ ﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ روزاﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف آﺧﺮ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻠ‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﭘ ﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎو ﻦ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫دورﺑ ﻦ ﻓ ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه
PAGE 102
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫رﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﻮش آﻣﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫روﺷﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ ﻪ‬ ‫ﻠ ﺪ ﻣ ﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫رﻧﮓ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ذﺧ ﺮه اﻧﺮژ‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮدم‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎﻣﮕ ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫
PAGE 103
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮ رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮ ا ﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه از ﻧﻮع ﻟﻤﺴ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ ﺶ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺴ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ »ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺴ ‹‹ را ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮار دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫‪ .١‬دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺘﺎن ﲤ ﺰ و ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ در ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﻫﺎى ﻣﺮﻃﻮب‪ ،‬رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد و دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﳌﺴﻰ را ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮاى ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺻﺤ ﺢ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﳌﺴﻰ ﻧ ﺎزى ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ز ﺎد آﻧﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ روﻛﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘ ﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ روى دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻟﻤﺴ ‪ ،‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻰ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻮﺷ ﺪن دﺳﺘﻜﺶ‪ ،‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻟﻤﺴ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫درﺳﺘﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬از ﻗﺮار دادن اﺟﺴﺎم ﻓﻠﺰى و ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻓﻠﺰﻫﺎى رﺳﺎﻧﺎ در‬ ‫ﻧﺰد ﻜﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻟﻤﺴ ﺧﻮددارى ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ز ﺮا ﻛﻪ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در اﺛﺮ ا ﺠﺎد ﲤﺎس ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ا ﺠﺎد‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﭘ ﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪ KG800‬را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده ا ﺪ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮ ﻢ‪ ،‬ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ا ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺟﺪ ﺪﺗﺮ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻦ آور ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟ ﺖ ﺑﭙﺮدازد‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎو اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻬﻤ در‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ آورده‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎٌ ﺟﻬﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه و ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺮ از آﺳ ﺐ وارد آﻣﺪن ﺑﻪ آن و ﺎ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‪ ،‬ﲤﺎﻣ ا ﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 106
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪم رﻋﺎ ﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ﳑﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك و ﻏ ﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ در‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫• در ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻤ ﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را در دﺳﺖ ﻧﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﻧﺰد ﻜ ا ﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﺰ ﻦ‪ ،‬اﻧﺒﺎر ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺳ ﺴﺎت ﺷ ﻤ ﺎ ﺎ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل‬ ‫اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣ رود‪ ،‬از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻗﺮارﮔﺮﻓﱳ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻧﺮژ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ راد ﻮ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ در ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻣﻮاج‬ ‫راد ﻮ و ﻣ ﺰان ﺟﺬب و ﮋه )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﻣﺪل ‪ KG800‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ا ﻃﺮاﺣ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ا ﻤﻨ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﱳ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻣﻮاج راد ﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارد‪ .‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎ ﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ﻋﻠﻤ اﺳﺘﻮار اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ا ﻤﻨ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ اﻓﺮاد ﺑﺪون در‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﺳﻦ و ﻣ ﺰان ﺳﻼﻣﺘ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎ ﻗﺮارﮔﺮﻓﱳ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻣﻮاج راد ﻮ ﻚ‬ ‫واﺣﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔ ﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎم واﺣﺪ ﺟﺬب و ﮋه ﺎ‪ SAR‬را‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣ ﮔ ﺮد‪ .
PAGE 108
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﮔﻮﺷ را از وﺳﺎ ﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧ ﻜ از ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺰ ﻮن‪،‬‬ ‫راد ﻮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙ ﻮﺗﺮ دور ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﮔﻮﺷ را از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮارﺗ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ﺎ ﻟﻮازم‬ ‫آﺷﭙﺰ دور ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻧﺰد ﻣﺎ ﺮو ﻮ ﺎ اﺟﺎق ﮔﺎز ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ ز ﺮا ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﮔﻮﺷ را زﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﺎﻧﺪاز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﮔﻮﺷ را در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻟﺮزش ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮك ﻣﻜﺎﻧ ﻜ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در اﺛﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺎف ﺎ روﻛﺶ و ﻨ ﻠ آﺳ ﺐ ﺑﺒ ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ و ﻣﻘﺮرات اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ را در‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪا ﻛﻪ در آن راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ رﻋﺎ ﺖ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﺳﺘ در ﺣ ﻦ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﲤﺎم دﻗﺖ ﺧﻮد را در ﻃﻮل راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن از ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬درﺻﻮرﺗ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮا ﻂ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ا ﺠﺎب ﻛﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺎ ﺟﻮاب دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺗﻮﻣﺒ ﻞ ﺧﻮد را در‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺎر ﺟﺎده ﭘﺎرك ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻧﺮژ ‪ RF‬ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ رو ﺑﺮﺧ از ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧ ﻜ اﺗﻮﻣﺒ ﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ اﺗﻮﻣﺒ ﻞ ﺎ‬ ‫ﲡﻬ ﺰات ا ﻤﻨ ﺗﺎﺛ ﺮ ﮔﺬارد‪.
PAGE 110
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎ ﻞ ﺑ ﺳ ﻢ در ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺧﺘﻼل ﻣ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ رو زﻣ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻛﺴﺐ‬ ‫اﺟﺎزه از ﻛﺎدر ﭘﺮواز از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﻃﺮ و ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮدﻛﺎن‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ را دور از دﺳﺘﺮس ﻛﻮدﻛﺎن ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﮔﻮﺷ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 111
‫اﺟﺰاء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﺎز‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺮ ﺴﺘﺎل ﻣﺎ ﻊ )‪(LCD‬‬ ‫اﺻﻠ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﳕﺎدﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل ﻗﺪرت‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ و‬ ‫ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﭘﺎ ﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎى ﺣﺮوف و اﻋﺪاد‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑ ﺎر‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬ ‫را ﺑﺮا ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ وارد ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ﻓﺸﺎر ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ﻠ ﺪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﲤﺎس ﻫﺎ ﺑ ﻦ اﳌﻠﻠ‬‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‬‫ﲤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ اﳒﺎم ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ را ﺗﺎ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‪ :‬ﺗﺎر ﺨﭽﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ در ﺎﻓﺘ و ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ را‬ ‫ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ا ﻦ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻚ ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮ ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر )ﺑﺎز(‪ :‬ﻣ ﺰان‬ ‫ﺻﺪا آﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ‪ -‬ﭼﺮاغ ﳕﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺮ ﺴﺘﺎل ﻣﺎ ﻊ ‪ LCD‬اﺻﻠ روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻃﻮﻻﻧ – ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫را ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻼش دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎب‬ ‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﺳﻮراخ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ دﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ‪/‬ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ و ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺮرﺳ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘ ﺶ از اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻮده و در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار‬ ‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎد‬ ‫ﳕﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ و‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﮔﺮاﻓ ﻜ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫اوﻟ ﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣ ﺎﻧ‬ ‫آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿ ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﳕﺎدﻫﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫از ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ در ﻧﻈﺮ دار ﺪ‪ ،‬ﳕﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ دو ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﺧﺘﺼﺎص داده‬ ‫ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى ﺗﻮﺿ ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎى ‪KG 800‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻛ ﻔ ﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﻪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻗﺪرت ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫از ‪ 2‬ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﺪن‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﲤﺎس و ﻛ ﻔ ﺖ ﺑﺪ ﺻﺪا را در ﭘ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا ﲤﺎس ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮد‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎر ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﺑﺎر‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ا اﺳﺖ‪ :‬در‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮا ﻫ ﭻ ﻚ‬ ‫از ﺧﺪﻣﺎت )ﲤﺎس‪ ،‬ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ و ﻣﻮارد از ا ﻦ ﻗﺒ ﻞ(‬ ‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬ ﺮ ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﱳ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى اﻃﻤ ﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﺑ ﺮون ﺑ ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ رﻫﺎﺳﺎز ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﻧﮕﺎه دار ﺪ‬ ‫و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰاﻧ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎرت را در درون ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎرت ﻗﺮار‬ ‫داده و ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧ ﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻤ ﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻨ ﺪ ﻪ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت‬ ‫درﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻃﻼ ﻰ رﻧﮓ روى‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮداﺷﱳ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‪،‬‬ ‫آن را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺸ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﺟﺎ ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﮔ ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺳﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫را ﻗﺮار دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﭘ ﺶ از ﻧﺨﺴﺘ ﻦ ﺑﺎراﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬در ﺣﺎﻟ ﻜﻪ ﻓﻼش ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺷﻤﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓ ﺶ آداﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﺟﺎ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬اﻧﺘﻬﺎ د ﮕﺮ آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺳﻔﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺰ اﺻﻠ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫• راﺑﻂ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ ز ﺮا ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و‪ /‬ﺎ آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ از ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ در ﺧﺎرج از ﻛﺸﻮر ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬از اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮا‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛ ﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺎ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﺑ ﺮون‬ ‫ﻧ ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺳﻔﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ا ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬ ‫اﺣﺘ ﺎط‬ ‫ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎرژر‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺳ ﻢ ﺑﺮق و ﺷﺎرژر را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ و آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ا ‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را‬ ‫وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا اﺻﻼح ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﱳ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ b‬ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﭘﺎك ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬دﻛﻤﻪ ارﺳﺎل ‪ a‬را ﺑﺮا ﮔﺮﻓﱳ )اﺗﺼﺎل( ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮا ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎس دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫راﺳﺖ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﱳ در‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎس ﺧﺎﲤﻪ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ و ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل‬ ‫ﺑﺎ آن ﺳﺮ و ﺎر دار ﺪ و ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﲤﺎس ﻣ ﮔ ﺮ ﺪ در ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ذﺧ ﺮه ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت‬ ‫و‪ /‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ذﺧ ﺮه ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺎﻓﱳ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم دﳋﻮاه در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻠ ﺪ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫آن ﲤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎن در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻚ ﲤﺎس ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ زﻧﮓ ﻣ ﺰﻧﺪ و ﻓﻼش ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ روﺷﻦ ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻛﻪ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه از ﻗﺒﻞ در دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ٬‬ﻧﺎم‬ ‫و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮا ﺧﺎﲤﻪ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﲤﺎس ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪ ﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﻧﮓ ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫داﺷﱳ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﺪار ﭼﭗ ‪ k‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ رﻓﺘﺎر را ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج )آﻧﺘﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل آﻧﱳ را ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ آﻧﱳ‬ ‫)‬ ‫( روس ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج آﻧﱳ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص در داﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐ ﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل آﻧﱳ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 123
‫در ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣ ﺒﺎ ﺴﺖ د ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮوف ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﺮوف‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ ٬‬ﻜﺒﺎر ‪ ٬‬دو ﺑﺎر ‪ ٬‬ﺳﻪ ﺎ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺑﺎر ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورود ﻣﱳ‬ ‫و ﺮا ﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺪد (‬ ‫ﺑﺮا ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﻛﺮدن اﻋﺪاد ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺪد رو‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دادن ﺑﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وارد‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﱳ ‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ ﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫وارد ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫دارد ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T9‬را روﺷﻦ ﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬و زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ T9‬را ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﱳ ﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬زﻣﺎﻧ ﻜﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T9‬ﻗﺮار دار ﺪ ‪ ٬‬ﺑﻪ وﺳ ﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ وارد ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫د ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎت ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮف ﻚ‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺣﺮوف ﻟﻐﺎت ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻣ ﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﺟﺎزه دﻫ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﺷﻮد و ﻗﺒﻞ از آن ﺑﻪ‬ ‫آﻧﭽﻪ رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺸﻮد ﺗﻮﺟﻬ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﱳ‬ ‫از د ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬د ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎن رو آﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﺮا ﺣﺮف اول‬ ‫‪ x‬دو ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮا ﺣﺮف دوم‬ ‫‪ x‬و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤ ﻦ ﺗﺮﺗ ﺐ‬ ‫را ﻜﺒﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮا ﻗﺮار دادن ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا ﺣﺬف ﺣﺮوف دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ b‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ b‬را ﻓﺸﺮده و ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎك ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺑﺮا اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﺣﺮوف و‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از د ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ذ ﻞ‬ ‫رﺟﻮع ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )اﻋﺪاد( ‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫اﺳﺎﻣ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ را ﻗﺎدر ﻣ ﺴﺎزد‬ ‫در ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ﺧﻮد ﻋﺪد وارد ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ )ﺑﺮا ﻣﺜﺎل ﻚ ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ اﻋﺪاد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ا ﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮر دﺳﺘ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﱳ ﺑﺮﮔﺮد ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﱳ ﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺮوف ﺑﻪ اﻋﺪاد ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اى از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ را در اﺧﺘ ﺎر ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻰ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒ ﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و‬ ‫از ﻃﺮ ﻖ دو ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎى ‪ d‬و‬ ‫‪ e‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ا ﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻣﻰ دﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺧﺎص را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮده و ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎى ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ى ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎ ﺎﻧﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ دﻗ ﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻى ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻛﻠ ﺪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧ را در ﻃﻮل ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﺴﺎزد‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ دﺳﺘ ﺎﺑ ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت در ﻃﻮل‬ ‫ﲤﺎس دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ رﻓﺖ و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑ ﻦ دو ﲤﺎس ‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﲤﺎس را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﻃﻮل ﻚ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﺪه رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﮔﻮﺷ در‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﲤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در زﻣﺎن آﻣﺎده ﺑ ﺎر ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ و‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ آﻧﺎن در ذ ﻞ ﺗﺸﺮ ﺢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺪون ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎس در ﺎﻓﺘ آن را رد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫و ﺑﺮا ا ﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔ دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺣ ﻦ ﲤﺎس‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﲤﺎس ورود را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‪/‬رد و ﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن‬ ‫رد ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﺎس ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺎ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺑ ﺶ از ﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات‬ ‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬ ﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﲤﺎس ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ اﻣﻜﺎن‬ ‫ﭘﺬ ﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻚ ﲤﺎس ﻓﻌﺎل و ﻚ ﲤﺎس در ﺣﺎل‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس دوم‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟ ﻜﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣ ﻜﻨ ﺪ ‪ ٬‬ﲤﺎس دوﻣ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﲤﺎس دوم را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و اﮔﺮ ‪ a‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ ‪ ٬‬زﻣﺎﻧ ﻜﻪ ﲤﺎس دوم ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ ﮕﺮدد ‪ ٬‬ﲤﺎس اول ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻗﺮار ﻣ ﮕ ﺮد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳ ﻠﻪ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ و ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﲤﺎس ﺑ ﻦ دو ﲤﺎس رﻓﺖ‬ ‫و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﲤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﻓﻌﻠ از ﺑ ﻦ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﲤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده ‪ ٬‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫ ‪/‬ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﻃﺮﻓﻪ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪٬‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻜﺎﳌﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫ ‪/‬ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻛﻞ ﲤﺎس ﲤﺎس ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ‬ ‫ﲤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻛﻪ اﻛﻨﻮن ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ز ﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﻧﺸﺎن داده و ﺑ ﺎﻧﮕﺮ ا ﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺷﻤﺎره اﺧﺘﺼﺎص داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١.x.١‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٣‬ﻣﻮارد دﳋﻮاه‬ ‫‪ ١٫٥‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢.x.١‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٣‬زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣.x.
PAGE 133
‫‪ ١٫٦‬دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٨‬ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٦‬دورﺑ ﻦ ﻓ ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٩‬ﳕﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٦‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٨‬ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٩‬ذﺧ ﺮه اﻧﺮژ‬ ‫‪MP٣ ٤٫٦‬‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٨‬ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٩‬زﺑﺎن‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٦‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٨‬ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٩‬اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫‪ ٦٫٦‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻓ ﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٦٫٨‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٦٫٩‬زﺑﺎن‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٦‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٨‬ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٩‬اﻣﻨ ﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٨٫٨‬ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫‪ ٨٫٩‬وﺿﻌ ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 134
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺮا‬ ‫ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎ ﲤﺎس و رو ﺪادﻫﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫و ﺷﺨﺼ ﺳﺎز ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه در دﺳﺘﺮس اﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ و ﺒﺮه‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ وﮔﻮﺷ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻚ از ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻠ ﻘﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺸ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎ ﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.x.١‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٣.x.١‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ و ﻧﺎم دﳋﻮاه را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا آن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا و‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ را ﳕ ﺘﻮان ﺗﻐ ﺮ داد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮا ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ در ﻟ ﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ رﻓﺘﻪ و ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ‪ d‬ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮﻧﺎم را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﲤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه‬ ‫)‪ (CLI‬را در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮان‬ ‫ﺳﻮاﺑﻖ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬در ﺎﻓﺘ را ﺑﺮرﺳ‬ ‫ﻛﺮد ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎم )در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد( ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﺎر ﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﲤﺎس ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﺎس ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٢‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ 10‬ﲤﺎس ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫داده ﻧﺸﺪه اﺧ ﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﺧ ﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٥ ..٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺬف ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺘ را ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه و ﻫﻤﻪ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻜﺠﺎ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﺪت ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦ ..٢‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ٦. ٢‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬ ‫ورود و ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ زﻣﺎن ﲤﺎس را ﻣﺠﺪدا ً ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ رﻗﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺎر ﺮد ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺰان اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﺑﺎﻗ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬اﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺰان اﻋﺘﺒﺎرﺗﺎن‬ ‫را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﺧﻮد ﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎن را ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮد ﺑﺨﻮد‬ ‫ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ روﺷﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ را ﭘﺲ از‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧ ..
PAGE 139
‫ﻣﻮارد دﳋﻮاه‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٣‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮارد دﳋﻮاه ﺧﻮد‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻜﺒﺎرا ﺠﺎد ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮد ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ دار ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﳋﻮاه‬ ‫ﺧﻮد دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧ ﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ‪ ،SMS‬ﺑﺎز ﻫﺎ و‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ آﻻرم دار‪،‬‬ ‫‪ MP3‬و دورﺑ ﻦ از ﻗﺒﻞ در ﻣﻮارد دﳋﻮاه ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢ ..
PAGE 140
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷ ﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ ‪] e‬ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٤ ..٣‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ اﻣ ﺎن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ اﻧﻮاع واﺣﺪﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ دار ﺪ ا ﻦ واﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ‪ :‬ارز را ﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮل‪،‬‬ ‫وزن‪ ،‬دﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ و ﺷﺘﺎب‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺶ و ﭘﻮﺷﺎك‪.‬‬ ‫از‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻠ ﺪ ‪] d‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﭼﻬﺎر واﺣﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ارزش ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ را ﺑﺮا واﺣﺪ ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﺑﺎ ‪ k‬و ‪ l‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 141
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٤‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ١. ٤‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Search‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ( را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ ‪] e‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ[ ﺎ ]ﺗﺎ ﺪ[ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻣ را ﻛﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬وارد ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧ ﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ وارد ﺮدن ﺣﺮوف اول ﻧﺎم ﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺳﺮ ﻊ ﻣ ﺴﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬در ﺻﻮرت ﲤﺎ ﻞ ﺑﻪ و ﺮا ﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬف ﺎ ﻛﭙ ﻚ ورود ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ز ﺮ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ١. ٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻚ ورود را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓ ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1000‬ورود اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓ ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ‪ 40‬ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮ ﻧﺎم را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧ ﺮه‬ ‫ﻛﺮده و ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ را در ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪاد‬ ‫ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧ ﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻌﺪاد‬ ‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 143
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻊ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٤. ١. ٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﻛﺪام از ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎص دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﲤﺎس ﺑﺎ آن ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﭙﺮداز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ا ﻦ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻢ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻜﺎر‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن د ﻤﻪ ‪] e‬اﺳﺎﻣ [‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺎز ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻊ ﺑﺮو ﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪] d‬اﻓﺰودن[‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣ ﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﻣﻮرد را اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺪ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻟ ( را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺮده ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در دﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﭙﺮداز ﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٧. ١. ٤‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ‪] e‬اﺳﺎﻣ [ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت رﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض‬ ‫ ﺑﺮا ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬‫آن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪d‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺎ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ را‬‫در ﺳ ﻢ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﳕﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﳕﺎ ﺶ رﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺑﺎ وارد ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻚ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎه و ﺳﺎل در ﺑﺎﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺑﺎر ﺗﻐ ﺮ دادن ﺗﺎر ﺦ در ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬ ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ روز رﺳﺎﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﻓﻌﻠ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻣ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧ ﺎ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ د ﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮان ﻚ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﺮا ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ و ﺎدآورﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 146
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف آﺧﺮ ﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ٢. ٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺟﺪ ﺪ را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا روز ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮع را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫درﺳﺘ را در ﺑﺨﺶ ز ﺮ؛ زﻣﺎن‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮار و ﻫﺸﺪار وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ روزاﻧﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ٢. ٤‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ روز ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ‪ i‬و ‪ j‬را‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺎر ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣ ..٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬در ﺻﻮرت ﺧﺎﻟ ﺑﻮدن‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‪] d‬ﻧﻮﺷﱳ[‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺎدداﺷﺖ را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورود ﻣﺘﻦ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣ ..٤‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده را از ﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣ ﻼد ‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺮ و ﺷﻤﺴ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٥‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪) SMS‬ﺳﺮو ﺲ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم رﺳﺎﻧ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه(‪) MMS ،‬ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﭘ ﺎم رﺳﺎﻧ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا (‪ ،‬ا ﻤ ﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ ،‬و ﻧ ﺰ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ١. ٥‬‬ ‫در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺮرﺳ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﭘ ﺎم ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮ ﺴﺪ و و ﺮا ﺶ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﺪ ﺪ وارد ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺑﻨﻮ ﺴ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﱳ ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 149
‫‪ x‬ارﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨ ارﺳﺎل ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه را وارد ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮا اﻓﺰودن ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ ﻠ ﺪ ‪ j‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ آدرس‬ ‫اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﭘﺲ از وارد ﻛﺮدن ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪d‬‬ ‫را ﺑﺮا ارﺳﺎل ﭘ ﺎم ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﲤﺎﻣ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺘ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺸﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در اﺳﻼ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪو ق ارﺳﺎل ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ذﺧ ﺮه در ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ را در اﺳﻼ ﺪ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺲ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ١. ٥‬‬ ‫ﻚ ﭘ ﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺣﺎو ﻣﱳ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ و ﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﭙﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬از ا ﻦ و ﮋﮔ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎدﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺘﻬﺎ ﭘ ﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺎ ا ﻤ ﻞ‬ ‫را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا را‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮده و ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﺪ ﺪ وارد ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 151
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ا ﺠﺎد ﭘ ﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا ‪ ،‬در ﺻﻮرت‬ ‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬار ﻚ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ )‪ (50K‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎرﮔﺬار اﺳﺖ و ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎ ﺎن‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬار ﻫ ﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد د ﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫اﺟﺮا ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﺳﻼ ﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﻠ را‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ اﺳﻼ ﺪ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﱳ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ ﺻﺪا ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﱳ و ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‪:‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌ ﺖ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ و ﻣﱳ ﭘ ﺎم را ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﻋﻼن ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ اﻋﻼم ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ”ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮا ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت ﻧ ﺴﺖ“ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت را از ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ”ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮا ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻧ ﺴﺖ“ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﻀﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن ذﺧ ﺮه را ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬف ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻓﺰا ﺶ دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ارﺳﺎل ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ اﺧ ﺮا ً ارﺳﺎل ﻛﺮده ا ﺪ و ﺎ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺘ ؛ آدرس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮع )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮا ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ(‪ ،‬زﻣﺎن و ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﭘ ﺎم‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع و اﻧﺪازه ﭘ ﺎم را‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ را ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٤ ..٥‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ‪ MMS‬ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺸﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣ ..
PAGE 154
‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ x‬ارﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم را ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل ﭘ ﺎم‪ ،‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ارﺳﺎل اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻫﺮ ﭘ ﺎم را ﺑﺮرﺳ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﭘ ﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٥ ..٥‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮا ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‬ ‫و ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫اﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫اﻟﮕﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧ ..٥‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ٧. ٥‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﺘﻨ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮار ز ﺮ در اﺧﺘ ﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ داﺷﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ زﻧﮓ ﺑﺰن‬ ‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎو ﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ٦. ٥‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ و اﺷﺘﺮاك ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد(‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎر آن در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻟ ﺴﺖ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ را ﻛﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮده ا ﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 156
‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨ ..٥‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ٨. ٥‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻧﻮاع ﭘ ﻐﺎم‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﱳ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻓﺎ ﺲ‪ ،‬اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧ ﻣﻠ ‪،X.400 ،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ ،‬اﻟ ﺘﺮوﻧ ‪ERMES ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﭘ ﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﱳ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﱳ را ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع د ﮕﺮ آن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺧﺼﻮص ﻧﺤﻮه دﺳﺘ ﺎﺑ ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ اراﺋﻪ‬ ‫دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺧﻮد ﲤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻣﺪت اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ ﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﻪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻨ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪت در‬ ‫ﻣﺮ ﺰ ﭘ ﺎم ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪ x‬اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ‪ :‬ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠ ﻐﺎت‪ :‬ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎزرﮔﺎﻧ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺿﺮور ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٣. ٨. ٥‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ا ﻦ ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢ را ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ﺷﺪه را در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘ ﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣ ﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ رو‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ﺷﺪه را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬روﻣ ﻨﮓ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ دراﺧﺘ ﺎر داﺷﱳ ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ در ﺧﺎرج‬ ‫از ﺸﻮر ﻫﻢ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ﮔﻮش ﻓﺮا دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻬ ﻪ‬ ‫ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻋ ﺴ در اﻧﺪازه دﳋﻮاه ﺧﻮد ﺗﻬ ﻪ‬ ‫ﳕﻮده‪ ،‬و از آن ﺑﺮا ﻋ ﺲ ﲤﺎس‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ و ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎرف و ﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﻪ ﻋ ﺲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ را ﮔﺮﻓﺘ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ آﻧﺮا در ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ ا ﻤ ﻞ ارﺳﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎزﺷﺪﻧ ز ﺮ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬روﺷﻨﺎ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺰان روﺷﻨﺎ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ا ﻧﺪازه‪ :‬اﻧﺪازه ﻋ ﺲ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﻠ ﭗوﺪﻮ‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ را ﻗﺎدر ﻣ ﺳﺎزد ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ و ﺪ ﻮ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه‬ ‫را در ﺣ ﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺮده و ﲤﺎﺷﺎ‬ ‫ﻠ ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ از ﺿﺒﻂ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ ا ﻤ ﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ارﺳﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎزﺷﺪﻧ ز ﺮ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬روﺷﻨﺎ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺰان روﺷﻨﺎ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ا ﻧﺪازه‪ :‬اﻧﺪازه ﻋ ﺲ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺧ ﺮ زﻣﺎﻧ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻔ ﺖ‪ :‬ﻔ ﺖ ﻠ ﭗ و ﺪ ﻮ را ﺗﻌ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ٣. ٦‬‬ ‫ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ ﺎ ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ز ﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٤ ..٦‬‬ ‫‪ KG800‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه داﺧﻠ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻚ ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺎ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ داﺧﻠ از ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ‪ MP3‬در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 161
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ‪ MP3‬را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ذﺧ ﺮه‬ ‫ﺳﺎز اﻧﺒﻮه از ﻚ را ﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ را ﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪)USB‬در ﻫﻤﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬ ‫ﻚ د ﺴﻚ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻨ در ‪Windows Explorer‬‬ ‫ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪Win98‬‬ ‫‪ ،SE‬ﺑﺎ ﺪ درا ﻮر ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ذﺧ ﺮه اﻧﺒﻮه را ﺑﺮا‬ ‫‪ Windows 98‬ﺑﺮ رو ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪ KG800‬ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ از ﻧﺮخ ﻣﺘﻐ ﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ‪ MP3‬و ‪ ACC‬ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 162
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻜﺮار ﺑﺨﺸ ﺧﺎص‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪) ON‬روﺷﻦ( ا ز ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺎﺻ از ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﻓﻌﻠ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻣ ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ‪ :‬در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ‪ MP3‬را ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ ﭘﺮوﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻧ ﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ اﻛﻮﻻ ﺰر‬‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ در ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﻨﻮ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺷﺪه ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪات ﺑ ﻦ اﳌﻠﻠ و‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ﻣﻠ ﭙ را ﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﭙ ﺑﺮدار‬ ‫ﻏ ﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮا ﭙ ﺮدن و ﺎ ﺑﺎزآﻓﺮ ﻨ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻮز در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬در‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ﻣﺤﻠ ﺑﻌﻀ ﺸﻮرﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭙ ﺮدن‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ از اﻗﻼم ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭙ را ﺖ‬ ‫ﳑﻨﻮع ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً در ﺧﺼﻮص ﻧﺤﻮه‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ اﻗﻼم ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ﻣﻠ ﺸﻮر‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﺧﻮد ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﱳ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﻋ ﺲ ارﺳﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﻓ ﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦ ..٦‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ رد ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺪ و ﺎ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ و ﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﭙﺮداز ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻋﻮض ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻓﺎ ﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﲤﺎﻣ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﺎ ﻞ را ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت و ﺳﺮو ﺴﻬﺎ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫) ﭘﺮوﺗ ﻞ ﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎ ﺑ ﺴ ﻢ ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧ ﺪار ‪ ،‬اﺧﺒﺎر‪ ،‬ﮔﺰارﺷﺎت ﻫﻮاﺷﻨﺎﺳ و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﭘﺮوازﻫﺎ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻫﺎ و‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﺎص ﺑﺮا ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اراﺋﻪ ﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻗﺮار‬ ‫داده ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻮدن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬ﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎ‬ ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ‪ ،‬ﺷﺒ ﻪ و‪ /‬ﺎ اراﺋﻪ ﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺴ ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼ ﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٧‬‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮا اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ﺳﺎ ﺘ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻓﻌﻠ ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﮔﺮد ﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ آن را در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ ،‬اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ آن را‬ ‫ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢ ..٧‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آدرس ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫وب دﳋﻮاه ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮا دﺳﺘﺮﺳ آﺳﺎن در دﻓﻌﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ دارا ﭼﻨﺪ ﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ از ﭘ ﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ از ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه را‬ ‫ﳕ ﺗﻮان ﺣﺬف ﻛﺮد‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮا اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮ ز ﺮ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‪ :‬ﺑﺮا و ﺮا ﺶ و ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪ WAP‬از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﻪ آدرس‬‫ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘ ) ‪ ( URL‬ﺳﺎ ﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺧﻮد را وارد‬ ‫و از آن ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮورت ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭗ “‪ ”http://‬ﻧﺪار ﺪ ز ﺮا‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ ‪ WAP‬آﻧﺮا ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد اﳒﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻠﻤﻪ رﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮر را ﺑﺮا ورود ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮور‬ ‫‪ APN‬وارد ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﭘﺮا ﺴ‬‫ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ ‪ :‬ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آدرس ‪ : IP‬آدرس ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮور ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را‬ ‫وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﭘﻮرت‪ :‬درﮔﺎه ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ را وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ‪DNS‬‬‫ﺳﺮور اﺻﻠ ‪ :‬آدرس ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮور ‪ DNS‬اﺻﻠ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮور ﻓﺮﻋ ‪ :‬آدرس ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮور ‪ DNS‬ﻓﺮﻋ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ﻛﻮﻛ را ﭘﺎك ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻣﻨ ﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮور ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻮﻛ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٥. ٤. ٧‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٦. ٤. ٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘ از ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫را ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫را ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﺮده ا ﺪ‪.
PAGE 170
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٨‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ١. ٨‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎز ﻫﺎ ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض ‪ :‬در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺟﺎوا ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺪ ﺮ ﺖ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺷﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺎ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪] d‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﺑﺮا ﺑﺎز‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﺠﺪد ﻣ ﺪﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ JAR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎوا‬ ‫اﺳﺖ و ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ JAD‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺗﻮﺻ ﻔ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻠ ﻪ ر ﺰ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از داﻧﻠﻮد ﺮدن‪ ،‬و از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺷﺒ ﻪ‪ ،‬ﻠ ﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻ ﻔﺎت ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ JAD‬را‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس زﺑﺎن اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ) ‪J2ME‬‬ ‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎداﻣ ﻜﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺻ‬ ‫ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮا ﻧﻮع ﺧﺎﺻ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﺎوا ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺑﺎزار ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﺟﺪ ﺪ و ﺧﺎرق اﻟﻌﺎده ال ﺟ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ‪ KG800‬از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻧﺒﺎر اﻧﺒﻮه‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪، USB‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از د ﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔ ﺮ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻋﻜﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓ ﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﱳ و ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﭙﺮداز ﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ را ﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ ﻧ ﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮم‬ ‫اﻓﺰارﻫﺎ اﺿﺎﻓ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 173
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﻧﻮع ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ا را ﻣ ﺗﻮان در ا ﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﺮد‪ .‬از ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در اﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ از ﻚ را ﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ را ﺎﻧﻪ د ﮕﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘ ﺶ ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪JPG (Max 460K) ، GIF (Max‬‬ ‫‪ (100K‬وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻚ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ را ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫اﻧﺪازه آن ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 30‬ﻛ ﻠﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ د ﻮار ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬ ‫ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً از ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد را ﺎﻧﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 174
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫را ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در آن ﺑﺎرﮔ ﺮ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﳒﺎم دادن ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ز ﺮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ا ﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‬ ‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻮ<ﭼﻨﺪ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا <آﻟﺒﻮم‬ ‫ﻓ ﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر !‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﳕ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪* : / \ ،‬‬ ‫?”><|‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻓﺎ ﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﲤﺎﻣ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﺎ ﻞ را ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢ ..
PAGE 175
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪JPG.‬‬ ‫) ‪ (.JPEG‬از اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻛﺎﻏﺬد‬ ‫ﻮار ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪-‬ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا ‪-‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮو ﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫د ﻮار را از ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻋﻮض ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪا ﺜﺮ از ‪ 200‬ﺎرا ﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﳕﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻳ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﲤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﺎﻳﻞ را ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 176
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٥ ..٨‬‬ ‫ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨ را ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ ‪ TXT‬را‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ TXT‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 460‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻋﻮض ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮارد ز ﺮ ﺑﺮرﺳ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ ﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ﻓﻌﻠ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻧﻮﺷﱳ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ :‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺎ ﺳﺮو ﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧ ﻜ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺻﺪا داﻧﻠﻮد ﺷﺪه از‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﺻﺪا ﺑﺎرﮔ ﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه از ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﻧﻮع ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه ا را ﻣ ﺗﻮان در ا ﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﺮد‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١ ..٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ ﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﺮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ ووﻗﺖ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ١. ٩‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ روز را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ وارد ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﳕﺎ ﺶ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎر ﺦ را ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪,DD/MM/YYYY‬‬ ‫‪ MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻨ ﺪ‪ D: ) .‬روز ‪ :M /‬ﻣﺎه ‪ : Y /‬ﺳﺎل (‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ١. ٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫وﻗﺖ )زﻣﺎن( ﻨﻮﻧ ﺎ ﺟﺎر را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ داﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﻣﺪت روﺷﻨ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫روﺷﻨﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٥. ٢. ٩‬‬ ‫روﺷﻨﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮان ﺑ ﻦ ‪ 40%‬ﺗﺎ ‪100%‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ ﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٦. ٢. ٩‬‬ ‫وﺿﻊ ﻨﻮﻧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﮔﺸﻮدن ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ وﺿﻊ در ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻠ ﺪ ﻣ ﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٧. ٢. ٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪) On‬روﺷﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ دار‬ ‫و ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ در وﺳﻂ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻧﮓ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٨. ٢.
PAGE 180
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ از ‪ LG PC Sync‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺗﺒﺎدل ﳕﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎه از ﻚ وﺳ ﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬د ﮕﺮ‬ ‫داده و اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺪ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎ ﺪ ﺗﺒﺎدل‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺑﺮو ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﭙ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ز ﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﭙ ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪,MP3 (.mp3, mp4, aac, m4a‬‬‫‪ :(wma‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓ ﻠﻢ )‪ :(3GP،MP4‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ )‪:(VCF.‬‬‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ x‬اﺗﺼﺎل‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ ارﺗﺒﺎط‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ا ﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻣ دﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ا ﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺮداﺧﺘﻪ و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬در آن ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ رؤ ﺖ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در‬ ‫ﺳﺎ ﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻧﺎم ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ Bluetooth‬را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎم ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض ‪ LG KG800‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻟ ﺴﺘ از ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻛﻪ ا ﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ آﻧﻬﺎ را‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ ﳕﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺸﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ‪ GPRS‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ GPRS‬ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮوع ‪ WAP‬ﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻨ را ﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ ﺷﻮد و اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫داده ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬وﻗﺘ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻣ ﺑﺮ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ GPRS‬ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻣ ﺎﺑﺪ وﻟ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﻫﻨﻮز ﺑﺮﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦ ..٩‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ١. ٦. ٩‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ ،‬ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓ ﺲ و ﲤﺎس داده ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره د ﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﲤﺎم ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ :‬ﲤﺎﻣ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ :‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﺑﻮدن‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬درﺻﻮرﺗ ﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﮔﺮ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬وﻗﺘ ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺎ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﻣﺤ ﻄ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺟﻠﺴﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺎرﺑﺮ ‪1‬و ‪ : 2‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺎرﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ز ﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮدن‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺷﱳ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ا ﻪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻠ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﲤﺎم ﭘ ﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺷﻨ ﺪه‬ ‫ﺷﺪه را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن ﮔﻮﺷ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻌﺪ از ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻌﺪ از ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ده ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻌﺪ از ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 187
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٥. ٦. ٩‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒ ﻪ(‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ را در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻨ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ )وارده(‬ ‫را ﳕ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳕﺎ ﺶ وﺿﻌ ﺖ ‪ :‬وﺿﻌ ﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮق دﻗ ﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٦. ٦. ٩‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮروﺷﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺮد ﺪ ﺣ ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪت ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ را‬ ‫در ﺟﺮ ﺎن ﻣ ﺎﳌﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دﻗ ﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪا ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ .٣‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺷﺪ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را روﺷﻦ ﻣ ﻨ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﭘ ﻦ ﺪ را‬ ‫وارد ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬اﮔﺮ ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎر ﭘ ﻦ ﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ وارد ﻨ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﭘ ﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ‪ PUK‬ﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻧ ﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PUK .٥‬ﻛﺪ را ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺎر ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ وارد ﻨ ﺪ اﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 10‬ﺑﺎر ﭘ ﻦ ﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ را وارد ﳕﺎ ﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻨﺘﺎن را ﳕ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎز ﻨ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٢. ٧.
PAGE 189
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٤. ٧. ٩‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎرت(‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺧﺮوﺟ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺪ ﭘ ﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺴﺘ ﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ را ﺑﺎ ﺪ در ﻟ ﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ ﺧﻮد اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ رﻣﺰ‪ :‬رﻣﺰ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺖ ﲤﺎس را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻋ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﳑﻨﻮﻋ ﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( ٦. ٧. ٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ آ ﺎ در زﻣﺎن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻮ ز ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺎ ﺧ ﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ‪ :‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪) .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‪ :‬در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣ ﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﺣﺘ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌ ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨ ..
PAGE 191
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺑﺮا ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧ ﺎز‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺪام از آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻬ ﻪ ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آداﭘﺘﻮر ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗ‬ ‫)ﺷﺎرژر(‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﺷﺎرژر ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫در ﻣﻮاﻗﻌ ﻪ ﺧﺎرج‬ ‫از ﻣﻨﺰل و ﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺎر‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘ ﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻛ ﺒ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪-‬ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‪ :‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Answer‬و ‪ ، End‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣ ﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬دآﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪ Hold‬و ﻣ ﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‪ LG‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ اﺻﻠ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ را از درﺟﻪ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﺳﺎﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮا اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎ ﻨﺪه و ﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﺤﻠ ﲤﺎس‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 193
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ‪KG800 :‬‬ ‫ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺤ ﻂ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ا ﺜﺮ ‪+55°C :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ اﻗﻞ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬
PAGE 194
KG800 U s e r G u i d e - English 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW
PAGE 195
Table of Contents Table of Contents How to Use Touch Button 5 Introduction 7 For Your Safety 8 Guidelines for safe and efficient use 9 KG800 features 14 Parts of the phone Display information On-Screen Icons Installation 18 20 Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Charging the battery 21 Disconnecting the charger 22 2 General functions 23 Call register Making and answering calls Entering text 25 Changing the text input mode Contacts 28 Missed calls Received calls Dialled calls All calls
PAGE 196
Organiser 42 Search contacts Add new Caller groups Speed dial Own number My business card Settings Calendar Add new View daily schedules Delete past Delete all Go to date Set alarm tone Memo Calendar Settings Messages 48 Multimedia 58 59 49 Camera Video camera Voice recorder 51 52 Record View list New message 43 44 46 Write text message Write multimedia message Inbox Drafts Outbox Listen to voice mail Info message Read Topics 53 54 Templates MP3 Photo album Video album Settings 60 Tabl
PAGE 197
Table of Contents Table of Contents Browser 64 Settings Home Bookmarks Go to URL Settings 65 Date & time Profiles Cache Cookie Clear cache Clear cookie Security My stuff Date Time Display 67 68 Games & apps Profiles 4 Wallpaper Menu colour Standby text Backlight Brightness Network name Home screen shortcut Dial font colour 72 73 74 75 Bluetooth Modem Network GPRS attach 77 80 81 Calling Call divert Auto answer Answer mode Send my number Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial 84 85 Sec
PAGE 198
How to Use Touch Button ] This product’s buttons on the slide are touch buttons. Be sure to read “Cautions for Touch Buttons” before using touch buttons. Cautions for Touch Buttons 1. Make sure your hands are clean and dry. - Remove all moisture from the surface of your hands or the touch buttons in a humid environment. Touch button image 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW Touch Button 2.
PAGE 199
How to Use Touch Button How to Use Touch Button 6. Touch buttons may not work normally if a mobile phone case or plastic is covering the touch buttons. Also, touch buttons may not work normally if you are using it wearing a glove. 7. Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of touch buttons, as contact with them may result in error.
PAGE 200
Introduction 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KG800 cellular phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.
PAGE 201
For Your Safety For Your Safety 8 Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. WARNING! • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all times in aircrafts. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations. • For your safety, use ONLY specified ORIGINAL batteries and chargers.
PAGE 202
Guidelines for safe and efficient use This mobile phone model KG800 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. This requirement is based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. ] The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
PAGE 203
Guidelines for safe and efficient use ] Guidelines for safe and efficient use 10 Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. ] Keep away from electrical appliances such as a TV's, radios and personal computers. ] The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. ] Do not drop. ] Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. ] The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper.
PAGE 204
] Efficient phone operation To enjoy optimum performance with minimum power consumption please: ] Hold the phone as you speak to any other telephone. While speaking directly into the microphone, angle the antenna in a direction up and over your shoulder. If the antenna is extendable/retractable, it should be extended during a call. ] Do not hold the antenna when the phone is in use.
PAGE 205
Guidelines for safe and efficient use ] Guidelines for safe and efficient use Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. ] RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your motor vehicle such as a car stereo or safety equipment. ] When riding in a car, do not leave your phone or set up the hands-free kit near to the air bag. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag is activated, you may be seriously injured.
PAGE 206
] Network service ] Some services and functions described in this user's guide are dependent on network or subscription. Therefore, all menus may not be available in your phone. Please consult your network operator for more information about your subscription. Avoid damage to your hearing ] Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn the handset on or off close to your ear.
PAGE 207
KG800 features KG800 features Parts of the phone Open view Earpiece Navigation keys Main LCD v In standby mode: v Top: Icons showing signal i Briefly: List of Favourites j Briefly: List of Contacts k Briefly: List of Profiles (Hold down: Activate/ Deactivate Vibrate mode) l Briefly: List of Messages v In menu: scroll up & down 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW strength, battery level and various other functions.
PAGE 208
These keys perform the function Indicated in the bottom of the display. KG800 features Left soft key/ Right soft key Confirm key Selects menu options and confirms actions. Clear key Deletes a character with each press. Hold the key down to clear all input. Use this key to go back to a previous screen. Send key v Dial a phone number and answer a call. v In standby mode: shows a history of calls made, received, and missed.
PAGE 209
KG800 features Left side view KG800 features Side keys v In standby mode (opened): Volume of key tone v In standby mode (closed): Short press - The main LCD light on. Long press - Only display a wallpaper. v In menu: scroll up & down v During a call: volume of the earpiece Note v To protect the sense of hearing while Slide open, maximum volume level is 3. 16 Right side view End key v Switch on/off (hold down) v End or reject a call.
PAGE 210
Rear view Flash Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover. Holes for a carrying strap KG800 features Camera lens Battery Battery charging connector/ Cable connector and Ear jack Note v Please ensure phone is powered on and in idle mode before connecting the USB cable.
PAGE 211
KG800 features KG800 features Display Information Icon area On-Screen Icons Text and graphic area 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY Area First line Middle lines Last line 18 The screen displays several icons. These are described below. 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW Soft key indications Description Displays various icons. Display messages, instructions and any information that you enter, such as number to be dialled. Shows the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys.
PAGE 212
change depending on network coverage. When the signal strength is below 2 bars, you may experience muting, call drop and poor audio. Please refer to this signal as an indicator for your calls. When there are no bars, that means that there is no network coverage: in this case, you won’t be able to access the network for any service (call, messages and so on). Icon/Indicator Description Vibrate only menu in profile. General menu in profile. Loud menu in profile. Silent menu in profile.
PAGE 213
Installation Installation Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery. Press and hold down the battery release button and slide the battery down. 2. Install the SIM card. Insert and slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction.
PAGE 214
Charging the Battery Before connecting the travel adapter to the phone you must first install the battery. Installation 3. Install the battery. Slide the battery upwards until it snaps back into place. 1. Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. 2. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the side of the phone until it clicks into place. 3.
PAGE 215
Installation CAUTION! Installation • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. • If you use the battery pack charger out of your own country, use an attachment plug adaptor for the proper configuration. • Do not remove your battery or the SIM card while charging. WARNING! • Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire.
PAGE 216
General Functions Making a call 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. 2. Enter a phone number, including the area code. ] Press and hold the clear key b to erase the entire number. 3. Press the send key a to call the number. 4. To end the call, press the end key . Making a call from the call history list 1. In standby mode, press the send key a , and the latest incoming, outgoing and missed phone numbers will be displayed. 2. Select the desired number by using the up/down navigation keys. 3.
PAGE 217
General Functions Adjusting the volume General Functions Note v In standby mode with the phone open, pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume. 24 Note If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a call, use the side keyso. Press the up side key to increase and down side key to decrease the volume. v If Press any key has been set as the answer mode any key press will answer a call except for the or the right soft key.
PAGE 218
ABC mode You can check the strength of your signal by the signal indicator ( ) on the LCD screen of your phone. Signal strength can vary, particularly inside buildings. Moving near to a window may improve reception. This mode lets you enter letters by pressing the key labelled with the required letter once, twice, three or four times until the letter is displayed. 123 mode (Number mode) Entering text You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad.
PAGE 219
General Functions General Functions 26 2. Change the text input mode by pressing You can check the current text input mode in the top right corner of the LCD screen. Using the T9 mode The T9 predictive text input mode lets you enter words easily with a minimum number of key presses. As you press each key, the phone begins to display the characters that it thinks you are typing based on the built-in dictionary. You can also add new words in the dictionary.
PAGE 220
Note v Refer to the table below for more without saving your input, press . The phone goes back to standby mode. Using the ABC mode Use the to keys to enter your text. 1. Press the key labelled with the required letter: ] Once for the first letter. ] Twice for the second letter. ] And so on. 2. To insert a space, press the key once. To delete letters, press the b key. Press and hold down the b key to clear the whole display. information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys.
PAGE 221
General Functions General Functions Using the 123 (Number) mode Contacts The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode. You can quickly switch from letters to numbers by pressing and holding down the ( ) key. You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names in the memory of your SIM card.
PAGE 222
Selecting Functions and Options 1IRY 1IRY 1IRY Press the left soft key to access the available menu. 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW 'SRXEGXW Press the right soft key to access the available Contacts. Selecting Functions and Options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in the menus and submenus, accessed via the two soft keys marked d and e . Each menu and sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function.
PAGE 223
In-call menu In-call menu Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call. To access these functions during a call, initially press the MP3 key to unlock the touch screen and then press the left soft key [Options]. During a call The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different to the default main menu displayed when in standby mode, and the options are described below.
PAGE 224
Muting the microphone Switching DTMF tones on during a call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, press the left soft key, and then select DTMF on. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way. DTMF tones allow your phone to make use of an automated switchboard. Multiparty or conference calls The multiparty or conference service provides you with the ability to have a simultaneous conversation with more than one caller, if your network operator supports this feature.
PAGE 225
In-call menu Putting a conference call on hold In-call menu Press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Hold all. Activate the conference call on hold Press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Join all. Adding calls to the conference call To add a call to an existing conference call, press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Join all.
PAGE 226
Menu Tree 1. Profiles 1.X.1 Activate 1.X.2 Personalise 1.X.3 Rename 2. Call register 2.1 Missed calls 2.2 Received calls 2.3 Dialled calls 2.4 All calls 2.5 Delete recent calls 2.6 Call charges 2.7 GPRS information 3. Tools 3.1 Favourites 3.2 Alarm clock 3.3Calculator 3.4 Unit converter 3.5 World time 3.6 SIM-Menu 4. Organiser Menu Tree The following illustration shows the available menu structure and indicates the: ] Number assigned to each menu option. 5. Messages 5.1 New message 5.2 Inbox 5.
PAGE 227
Menu Tree Menu Tree 6. Multimedia 6.1 Camera 6.2 Video camera 6.3 Voice recorder 6.4 MP3 6.5 Photo album 6.6 Video album 6.7 Settings 7. Browser 7.1 Home 7.2 Bookmarks 7.3 Go to URL 7.4 Settings 34 8. My stuff 8.1 Games & apps 8.2 Videos 8.3 Photos 8.4 Music 8.5 Text 8.6 Images 8.7 Sounds 8.8 Others 9. Settings 9.1 Date & time 9.2 Display 9.3 Power saving 9.4 Language 9.5 Connectivity 9.6 Calling 9.7 Security 9.8 Memory status 9.
PAGE 228
Profiles ] Ring tone: Select the desired ring tone Activate (Menu 1.X.1) ] Keypad tone: Select the desired keypad 1. A list of profiles is displayed. 2. In the Profiles list, scroll to the profile you want to activate and press the left soft key d OK key. 3. Then, select Activate. Personalise (Menu 1.X.2) Scroll to the desired profile in the Profile list. After pressing the left soft key d or the OK key, select Personalise. The profile setting option opens. Set the option as required.
PAGE 229
Profiles Profiles Note v Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be renamed. 1. To change the name of a profile, scroll to the profile in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key d or the OK key, select Rename. 2. Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key d [OK].
PAGE 230
Call register Missed calls Received calls Menu 2.2 This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls. You can also: ] View the number if available and call it or save it in the Address Book ] Enter new name for the number and save both in the Address Book ] Send a message to this number ] Delete the call from the list Call register You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area.
PAGE 231
Call register Call register All calls Menu 2.4 You can view all lists of outgoing or incoming calls. Delete recent calls ] Reset all: Allows you to reset the timers of Menu 2.5 Menu 2.6 Call duration (Menu 2.6.1) Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times. The following timers are available: ] Last call: Length of the last call. ] All calls: Total length of all calls made and incoming calls since the timer was last reset. 38 calls.
PAGE 232
] Auto display: This network service allows GPRS information Call register you to automatically see the cost of your last calls. If set to On, you can see the last cost when the call is released. Menu 2.7 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. Call duration (Menu 2.7.1) You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volume (Menu 2.7.
PAGE 233
Tools Tools Favourites Menu 3.1 This option allows you to add your own favourites to the list already provided. Once you create your own menu, you can access the desired function quickly in the idle screen by pressing the up navigation key. Note v The menu of SMS, MMS, Games & apps, Connectivity, Alarm clock, MP3 and Camera is already provided in your own favourites. Alarm clock 40 Menu 3.2 You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1.
PAGE 234
Menu 3.4 This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 9 types that can be converted into units: Currency, Area, Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume, Velocity, Shoes and Clothes. 1. You can select one of nine unit types by pressing d [OK] key. 2. Select the unit you want to convert by pressing i and j . It’s impossible to input “-” symbol inunit converter. 3. Select the standard value by using k , l. 1.
PAGE 235
Organiser ] Organiser Search contacts (Menu 4.1.1) Send via Bluetooth: You can send the data of phone book to devices which is compatible with Bluetooth through Bluetooth. 1. Select Search by pressing the right soft key e [Contacts] or [OK]. 2. Enter the name that you want to search. v While sending and recieving the format Contacts Menu 4.1 Note is first name first position Note v Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name or number you want to search. 3.
PAGE 236
Add new (Menu 4.1.2) Note v Maximum stored name and number length depends on SIM-card type. 1. Select Add new by pressing the left soft key d [OK] or [OK]. 2. Select the memory you want to save: SIM or Phone. If you set to Phone, you need to select which number you want as a main number. a. Press d [OK] to input a name. b. Press d [Save], then you can input a number. c. You can set a group for the entry by pressing k , l . Caller groups (Menu 4.1.
PAGE 237
Organiser Organiser Speed dial (Menu 4.1.4) My business card (Menu 4.1.6) Assign contacts to any of the keys to . You can then call that contact by pressing the corresponding number key. 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right soft key e [Contacts] in standby mode. 2. Scroll to Speed dial, then press the left soft key d [OK]. 3. If you want to add speed dial, select (empty). Then, you can search the name in phonebook. 4.
PAGE 238
] Memory in use: This feature allows you to see how many entries are in use, or free in your phonebook. ] Clear contacts You can delete all the entries in the SIM and Phone. This function requires the Security code. 1. Scroll to highlight Clear contacts, and then press the left soft key d [OK]. 2. Highlight the memory you wish to erase, and then press the left soft key d [OK]. 3. Enter the security code and press the left soft key d [OK] or the right soft key e [Back].
PAGE 239
Organiser Organiser Calendar Menu 4.2 When you enter this menu a calendar will be displayed. The month and year are shown at the top of the screen. Whenever you the change the date under the Settings menu, the calender will update automatically. The current date will be highlighted in green and any schedule or memos will be indicated with a red triangle at the top left hand corner of the corresponding square. An audible alarm can be set for memo’s and reminders. To change the day, month and year.
PAGE 240
Calendar Settings You can go the chosen date directly. You can choose a type of calendar (A.D, Hijriya or Farsi) by using this function. Set alarm tone (Menu 4.2.6) Menu 4.4 Organiser Go to date (Menu 4.2.5) You can set the alarm tone of each chosen date. Memo Menu 4.3 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key d [OK]. 2. If the entry is empty, press the left soft key d [Write]. 3. Input the memo and then press the left soft key d [OK].
PAGE 241
Messages Messages New message Menu 5.1 This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. Write text message (Menu 5.1.1) You can write and edit text message, checking the number of message pages. 1. Enter the New messages menu by pressing the left soft key d [OK]. 2. If you want to write a new message, select Write text message. 3. To make text input easier, use T9. 4.
PAGE 242
] Colour: You can also set the Colour of the Note v This phone supports EMS release 5, so is available to send colour pictures, sounds, text styles, etc.. If the other parties handsets do not support such options, the pictures, sounds or texts sent may not be displayed correctly on their phones. Write multimedia message (Menu 5.1.2) A multimedia message can contain text, images, and/or sound clips. This feature can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider.
PAGE 243
Messages Messages Options ] Send: You can send multimedia messages to multiple recipients, as well as save it to send at a later time. Note v All messages will be automatically saved in the outbox folder, even after a sending failure. ] Preview: You can preview multimedia messages you have created. ] Save: You can save multimedia messages To drafts or As template. ] Edit subject: Allows you to modify the multimedia message you have chosen.
PAGE 244
v When creating a multimedia message, if you upload a picture (50K) you may find that whilst the picture is loading you will not be able to carry out any other actions until the picture has competed loading. Inbox Menu 5.2 You will be alerted when you have received a message. They will be stored in the Inbox. In the Inbox, you can identify each message by icons. For detail, see the icon directive.
PAGE 245
Messages ] Information: You can view information Messages about received messages; Sender’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. ] Delete all: You can delete all messages. Outbox Icon Drafts Menu 5.3 Using this menu, you can preset up to five multimedia messages that you use most frequently. This menu shows the preset multimedia message list. The following options are available. ] View: You can see the multimedia messages.
PAGE 246
Menu 5.5 Once this menu has been selected, simply press the left soft key d [OK] to listen to voice mail. You can also hold down the key in standby mode to listen to voice mail. Note v When you receive a voice mail, your phone will display an icon and you will hear an alert. Please check with your network provider for details of their service in order to configure the handset correctly. Info message Menu 5.
PAGE 247
Messages Topics (Menu 5.6.2) Messages 54 (Dependent to network and subscription) ] Add new: You can add Info service message numbers in the Phone memory with its nickname. ] View list: You can see Info service message numbers which you have added. If you press d [Options], you can edit and delete info message categories which you have added. ] Active list: You can select info service message numbers in the active list. if you activate an info service number, you can receive messages sent from the number.
PAGE 248
] Reply charging: When a message is sent, it ] Delete all: Allows you to delete all allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. ] SMS centre: If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu. multimedia messages. Settings Messages ] Edit: You can edit multimedia templates. Menu 5.8 Text message (Menu 5.8.1) ] Message types: Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, X.
PAGE 249
Messages ] Auto retrieve: If you select On, you Messages 56 receive multimedia messages automatically. If you select Off, you receive only notification message in the inbox and then you can check this notification. If you select Home network only, you receive multimedia messages depends on Homenetwork. ] Network settings: If you select multimedia message server, you can set URL for multimedia message server. ] Permitted message types Personal: Personal message. Advertisements: Commercial message.
PAGE 250
Info message (Menu 5.8.4) Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. ] Alert Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. No: Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages. ] Languages You can select the language you want by pressing [On/Off]. Then, the info service message will be shown in the language that you selected.
PAGE 251
Multimedia Multimedia 58 Camera Menu 6.1 This application enables you to take a still picture. You can take a picture in your desired size, and use it for the contacts photo, home screen and other more general purposes. Once taken, a still image can be sent via Multimedia msg. Press the left soft key d to display the following popup menu items. ] Brightness: Determines the brightness. ] Size: Determines the size of an image. ] Timer: Determines the delay time.
PAGE 252
] Quality: Determines the quality of a video clip. v Use the k , l keys to scroll through the photos (please note that only pictures taken in 72l72 resolution will be listed here). v Once you have selected the photo you wish to use press the left soft key to save this in the contacts profile. v The photo will be shown when this particular contact calls you (as long as the contact does not have their telephone number set to hidden). Video camera Menu 6.
PAGE 253
Multimedia Multimedia 1. Once recording has started, the message Recording and the remaining time is displayed. 2. If you want to finish recording, press the left soft key d [Save]. 3. Key in Voice memo title, press the left soft key d [OK]. View list (Menu 6.3.2) The list of voice memos are displayed. You can playback and delete the recorded voice memo. The following [Options] menus are available MP3 Menu 6.4 The KG800 has an integrated MP3 player built-in.
PAGE 254
v KG800 doesn't support the variable rate of MP3 and AAC file. Therefore, you can't change the file from VBR MP3 format to AAC. You can transfer MP3 files from a compatible PC to the memory in your phone using the Mass Storage. When you connect the phone to a PC using the USB cable(supplied in the same package), this will be displayed as a removable disk through Windows Explorer. If you are using Win98 SE, you will have to install the Mass storage driver for Windows 98 on CD-ROM.
PAGE 255
Multimedia Multimedia - Playmode This menu allows to set the play mode. - Set shuffle You can listen to your MP3 music randomly. - Visual effect You can select the visual effect menus: Rainbow, Basic and Blue. This menu allows to change the backgroud of main LCD and sub LCD on playing MP3 file. 2. Delete: Deletes the file selected. 3. View details: To view the information of the file you selected. 4. Delete all: Deletes all of the files.
PAGE 256
Menu 6.6 You can view videos which have been saved in the memory. ] Play: You can play the video file when pressing the OK key or selecting Play menu of the Options menu. ] Send via Bluetooth: Send the selected file to another device via Bluetooth. ] Rename: Change the file name of selected file. ] Delete: Delete a file. ] Delete all: Delete all files in the list ] Information: Show the file information. Settings Menu 6.7 Camera (Menu 6.7.
PAGE 257
Browser Browser You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
PAGE 258
Menu 7.1 Connects to a homepage. The homepage will be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by the service provider if you have not defined it in the activated profile. ] Edit: You can edit the URL and/or the title of the selected bookmark. ] Delete: Deletes the selected bookmark. ] Delete all: Deletes all the bookmarks. Go to URL Bookmarks Menu 7.2 This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite web pages for easy access at a later time. To create a bookmark 1.
PAGE 259
Browser Browser 66 Each profile has submenus as follows: ] Activate: Activates the selected profile. ] Settings: Use this to edit and change WAP settings for the selected profile. - Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the address (URL) of a site you want to use as homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the front of each URL as the WAP Browser will automatically add it. - Bearer: You can set the bearer data service.
PAGE 260
Clear cookie (Menu 7.4.5) ] Add new: You can add a new profile. Removes all context saved in cookie. ] Delete: Deletes the selected profile from the list. Cache (Menu 7.4.2) The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone. Cookie (Menu 7.4.3) Security (Menu 7.4.6) Browser ] Rename: You can change the profile name. A list of the available certification is shown. ] Authority: You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone.
PAGE 261
My stuff My stuff Games & apps Menu 8.1 Games & apps (Menu 8.1.1) • Default Games: In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. The downloaded applications are organised in folders. Press the left soft key d [OK] to open the selected slide or launch the selected midlet. After selecting a folder, press [Options] and then sub menus available to several options are displayed.
PAGE 262
New Fantastic LG There is Mass Storage function in the KG800. if you connect the USB cable, you can use the phone as a Removable Disk. the Java program and the JAD file is a description file that includes all detailed information. From the network, prior to download, you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file.
PAGE 263
My stuff My stuff 4. Double click on « Removable disk » and open. A folder called My media will be displayed. Within that folder there are a further 5 folders. Do not disconnect the phone whilst a file transfer is in progress, doing so may damage the memory and corrupt the file. 5. When you want to disconnect the phone from your PC, use Windows to safely remove the handware and then disconnect the USB cable from the handset. v If you receive a call whilst in mass storage mode, the call will be rejected.
PAGE 264
Text v This folder supports .txt files. This folder is mainly used for transporting files from one PC to another. v The handset can preview JPG (Max 460K), GIF (Max 100K). v You can set an image file as wallpaper as long as it does not exceed 30k in size, for other formats please use the PC Suite. Photos v This folder is reserved for pictures taken using the phone's digital camera.
PAGE 265
My stuff My stuff Videos Menu 8.2 Show the list of 3GP and MP4 files . ] Play: You can play the video file by pressing the OK key or selecting Play from the Option menu. ] Send via Bluetooth: Send the selected file to another device via Bluetooth. ] Rename: change the file name of the selected file. The maximum length of characters is 200. And You can not change the extension of file. WARNING! The following characters, \ / : * ? “ < > | can not be used. Photos Menu 8.3 Shows the list of JPG files.
PAGE 266
] Delete all: Deletes all files in the list file. The maximum length of characters is 200. And You can not change the extension of file. ] Delete: Delete a file. ] Delete all: Deletes all the files in the list ] Information: Shows the file information. ] Information: Shows the file information. Music Text My stuff ] Rename: change the file name of selected Menu 8.5 Show the list of TXT files. ] View: You can see the TXT file by pressing the OK key or selecting View from the Option menu. Menu 8.
PAGE 267
My stuff My stuff 74 Images Menu 8.6 After selecting a image, press the left key d [View] and then you can check the options as follow: ] Set as wallpaper: Currently selected image can be set as a wallpaper. ] Write messages: The images downloaded from the network can be sent by Multimedia. Maximum message size is 100 kb for MMS message. ] Send via Bluetooth: The sound downloaded from network can be sent by Bluetooth. Sounds Menu 8.7 After selecting a sound, press the left key [Options].
PAGE 268
Menu 8.8 Any type of file can be stored here. This folder is mainly used for transporting files from one PC to another. ] View: You can view a file if it is one of the following types; JPG, GIF, WBMP, PNG and TXT. The handset can preview JPG (Max 460K), GIF (Max 100K).
PAGE 269
Settings Settings Date & time Menu 9.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Date (Menu 9.1.1) Set date You can enter the current date. Date format You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Time (Menu 9.1.2) Set time You can enter the current time. Time format Your can set the time format between 24hour and 12-hour. 76 Display MENU 9.2 Wallpaper (Menu 9.2.1) You can select the background pictures in standby mode.
PAGE 270
Power saving You can set the light-up duration of the display. This function saves battery power by keeping backlight brightness to max 40%. Menu 9.3 Settings Backlight (Menu 9.2.4) Brightness (Menu 9.2.5) The screen brightness can be adjusted from 40% to 100%. Language Network name (Menu 9.2.6) You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. If this function is activated, network name will be displayed on main LCD.
PAGE 271
Settings Settings Note v If you use LG PC Sync via Bluetooth, you can exchange data only within the phonebook. v When you receive data from another Bluetooth device, the phone requests confirmation. After confirming the transfer, the file will be copied on to your phone. v Depending on the file type, it will be stored in the following folders: - MP3 (.mp3, mp4, aac, m4a, wma): Music folder. - Video (.3GP, MP4): video folder. - Phonebook contacts (.VCF): Phonebook. - Text (.txt): Text folder.
PAGE 272
] Delete all: Allows you to delete all paired Bluetooth devices. Settings ] My handset’s visibility This indicates whether or not your handset will be visible to other Bluetooth devices. ] My handset’s name You can set the name of your Bluetooth device. The default name is LG KG800. Settings manufacturer of the device you are trying to pair with. Please check the User Manual of the device you are initiating the pair with to see if it already has a predetermined passcode in place.
PAGE 273
Settings Modem (Menu 9.5.2) Settings You can access the network services through the Modem. If you want to use the LG PC Sync, Contents bank or Internet Cube, you should access the menu and activate the modem and then plug in the USB cable. Network (Menu 9.5.3) You can select a network which will be registered either automatically or manually. Usually, the network selection is set to Automatic. Network selection You can select a network type.
PAGE 274
Calling You can set GPRS service depending on various situations. Call divert (Menu 9.6.1) Switch on If you select this menu, the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network when you switch the phone on. Starting a WAP or PC dial-up application created the connection between phone and network and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the GPRS network remains.
PAGE 275
Settings ] All fax calls Settings Diverts to a number with a fax connection unconditionally. ] Cancel all Cancels all call divert service. The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. • Activate Activate the corresponding service. To voice mail centre Forwards to message centre. This function is not shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus. To other number Inputs the number for diverting. To favourite number You can check back to last five diverted numbers.
PAGE 276
• Write short message: You can send a short text message to the caller who leave voice message. • Write multimedia message: You can send a multimedia message to the caller who leave voice message. • Delete all: You can delete all recorded voice messages. ] Ringing time Allow you to set your phone when the answering mode will be activated. • After 3 Secs After 3 seconds your phone will be activated to answering phone mode. • After 5 Secs After 5 seconds your phone will be activated to answering phone mode.
PAGE 277
Settings Answer mode (Menu 9.6.3) Settings ] Slide up If you select this menu, you can receive an incoming call when you open the slide. ] Any key If you select this menu, you can receive a call by pressing any key except [End] key. ] Send key only If you select this menu, you can receive a call by only pressing a [Send] key. Send my number (Menu 9.6.4) ] Off Your phone number will not be shown. Call waiting (Menu 9.6.
PAGE 278
Auto redial (Menu 9.6.7) When this function is activated, the phone will automatically try to redial in the case of failure to connect a call. ] Off Your phone will not make any attempts to redial when the original call has not connected. Security PIN code request Menu 9.7 (Menu 9.7.1) In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1.
PAGE 279
Settings Settings 86 Call barring (Menu 9.7.3) ] Change password The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password. You can view the following submenus. ] All outgoing calls The barring service for all outgoing calls. ] Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls.
PAGE 280
Change codes (Menu 9.7.5) (SIM dependent) PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorised person. You can change the access codes: Security code, PIN code, PIN2 code. 1. If you want to change the Security code/PIN1/ PIN2 code input your original code, and then press d [OK]. 2. Input new Security code/PIN1/PIN2 code and verify them. You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code.
PAGE 281
Settings Settings Memory status Menu 9.8 You can check free space and memory usage of each repository, Internal memory, Multimedia memory. You can go to each repository menu. Reset settings Menu 9.9 You can initialise all factory defaults. You will need the Security code to activate this function. ] Restore default settings: Allows you to restore the phone back to its default settings. ] Clear multimedia memory: Allows you to format the multimedia memory and create a default directory.
PAGE 282
Accessories Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Standard Battery Hands free earmicrophone and music player controller combo Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Stereo headset Controller: Answer & End button, music player control, volume control, Hold button and microphone.
PAGE 283
Technical Data Technical Data General Product name: KG800 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C Min: -10°C 90
PAGE 284